Samsung | SAMSUNG WB650 | Samsung WB650 صارف گائیڈ

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪NjǥƶɨɧǥƴɨȝƾŸǞǤǞžȥȚɬɳɭɞȶȤÄ‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪User Manual‬‬
‫‪WB650/WB660‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ — ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣/‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ — ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ — ﻧﮑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﺳﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ )ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ١٠۴/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻧﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫● ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺮﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ )‪ (RF‬ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﻌﮏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﻊ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Mac‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Apple Corporation‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ "‪High Definition Multimedia‬‬
‫‪ ،"Interface‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪HDMI Licencing‬‬
‫‪ LLC‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫● ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ www.samsung.com‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ www.samsungimaging.com‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﺍﻭﭘﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﺱ( ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ”‪ “OpenSourceInfo.pdf‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫] [‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ )ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫) (‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ )ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ,‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪DUAL IS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬
‫‪vdnhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬
‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،DUAL IS‬ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ )‪(+‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Contrast Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Exposure Bracket‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪) Auto Focus‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪) Digital Image Stabilisation‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Digital Print Order Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪) Exposure Value‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫‪GPS‬‬
‫‪) Global Positioning System‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ(‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪) Optical Image Stabilisation‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫● ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء‬
‫● ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫● ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨-۴٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ d‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫● ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢۵‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨-۴٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ țƾƈƄſȚ s‬ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫● ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫● ‪ < sǁŽƾŲ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫● ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ‪۴٨-۴٧ e‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۵۴ e‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫● ‪ < sǁŽƾŲ‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۴٧ e‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ‪۴٩ e‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫● ‪٣۴ e hǁŽƾŲ‬‬
‫● ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۶٢ e‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ‪۴٩ e‬‬
‫‪) EV‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ‪۵٩ e‬‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ‪۵٩ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ‪۶٠ e‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪۶٢ e‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫● ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ( ‪۶٣ e‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ( ‪۶۵ e‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫● ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٢۴ e (OIS‬‬
‫● ‪٢٩ e dǁŽƾŲ‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫● ‪ < sǁŽƾŲ‬ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫● ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ( ‪۵٠ e‬‬
‫● ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ( ‪۶٠ e‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۶٩ e‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٧٠ e‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪٧٢ e‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٠ e HDTV‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪٨٣ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٩١ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٩١ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٩١ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٩٢ e‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٩٢ e‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪١٠١ e‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪٣۶ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪.................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪.........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ‪٣۶ ..................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ‪٣٨ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ‪٣٨ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ‪٣٩ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٠ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪۴١ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪١٧ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٧ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪۴٢ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪۴٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٨ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪١٩ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢١ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٢١ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢١ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪۴۴ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪٢٢ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ‪۴۴ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۴۴ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٢٣ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪٢۴ ............................................................... (OIS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪۴۵ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ‪۴٧ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ‪٢۵ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪۴٣ .................................................‬‬
‫‪٢٧ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٩ ........................................................ DUAL IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪........................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٨‬‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ‪....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪۵٠ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ‪٣٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ‪٣١ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪٣٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪٣٣ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪٣۴ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪٣۴ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪٣۵ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۵۴ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪۵۴ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۵۵ ...................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ )ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ( ‪..............................................‬‬
‫‪۵۵‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵۶‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪................................................... (EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪.......................................................... (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪٧٩ .............................................................. (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٠ .......................... HDTV‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨٢ ....................................... (Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪٨٣ ............................................... Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪٨۵ .........................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨۶ .............................................. (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪۵٩ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨٧ ............................................... (Mac‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪٨٨ .................................. (PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪۶٢ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪۶٣ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٩ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٩٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪٩۵ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٩۶ ...................................................................‬‬
‫‪۶۶ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪۶٧ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٩۶ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٩٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪٩٨ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٠١ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٠۴ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪١٠٩ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪٧۵ ....................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی …………………………………………… ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ………………………………………… ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ……………………………………………………… ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ………………………………… ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ………………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی …………………………………………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ……………………………………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ……………………………………………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ……………………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ……………………………………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ …………………………………………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ………………………………………………… ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ …………………………………………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪(OIS‬‬
‫………………………………………… ‪٢۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬
‫………………………… ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺎﻻی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪/‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪DUAL IS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬
‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫● ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫● ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫● ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫پ‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫پ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢١‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(OIS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ]‪ .[P‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫● ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﺳﺒﺰ‪:‬‬
‫]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Language‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪穢剳檺‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫‪Deutsch‬‬
‫‪Español‬‬
‫‪Italiano‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪DST‬‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) Date & Time‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪: English‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) Time Zone‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ‪ [D] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫‪: 10/01/01‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪yyyy mm dd‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪2010 /01/01 10:00‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪ȏ‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ )]‪ ،([t] ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؛ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ P‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪FR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪FR‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1/2/3‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ S‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۵‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ١۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٧۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪, ) s ،d ،S‬‬
‫‪ ،( , ,‬ﻭ ‪ v‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪, ,‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪(OIS‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ OIS‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪.OIS‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪.OIS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۴‬‬
‫● ‪ OIS‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ً‬‫)ﻣﺜﻼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ‪ OIS‬ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺟﻠﻮی‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢۴‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ d‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨-۴٧‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ……………………………… ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٩ …………………………………… DUAL IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ………………………………………… ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ………………………… ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫……………………………………………… ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ………………………………………… ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ……… ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ………………………………………… ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ …………………………………………… ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ………………………………………… ‪٣۵‬‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ …………………………………………… ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ………………………………… ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ …………………………………… ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ………………………………………… ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ………………………………… ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫………………………………………………… ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ………………………………… ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ………………………………………… ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ………………………………………………… ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ …………………………………… ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ S‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ‪ S ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪DUAL IS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ d‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫»ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢۴‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ s‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫‪.‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ« ‪ ٣١-٣٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ« ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ s‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺨﺺ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ s‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȏ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪OK :‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﻠﺐ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻢ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪,‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ‪ EV‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ EV‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣۵‬‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪dnhApaS‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪ GPS‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [GPS ON] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ‪ GPS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ GPS‬ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ١‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ٣ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫● ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣۶‬‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ AEB‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻳﺎ ‪ AEB‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻭﺑﺎﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ‪ GPS‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ )ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ(ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺟﻮی‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ( ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫”‪ “Map unavailable.‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪..‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ GPS‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺣﻮﻣﻪ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ GPS ON‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ [o] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ]‪ [D/M/F/t‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪50M‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪GPS‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻪ‪ /‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ[‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ[(‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪ (١٩٨۴ World Geodetic System) ٨۴ WGS‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ GPS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۶٣‬ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ۵۵‬ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ‪ GPS‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣۵٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ‪ GPS‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﮐﺮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ GPS ON‬ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ GPS ON‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ]‪ [F/t‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ]‪ [D/M/F/t‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻪ‪ /‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ[‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ[(‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫● ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ www.samsung.com‬ﻳﺎ ‪ www.samsungimaging.com‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )‪ H.264 (MPEG-4.AVC‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫)‪ ،H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ‪ ISO/IEC‬ﻭ ‪ ITU-T‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۴‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ »ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ) ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﯽ ‪ OIS‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ v‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ )ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 60‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٢۴٠ x ٣٢٠‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫»ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫‪ȏ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ v‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪sdnhApa‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ۴٠ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫……………………… ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ …………………………………… ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ……………………………………… ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ……………………… ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ………………………………… ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ )ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ(‬
‫…………… ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ………………………………… ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ………………………… ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪۵٩ ………………… (EV‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ……………………………… ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ……………………………………… ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ……………………………………… ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪۴٩ …………………………………… ISO‬‬
‫………………………… ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪۵٩ ……………………… (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ………………………………… ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( …………………… ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ……………………… ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………… ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ …………………………… ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ……………………… ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………… ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ …………………………………… ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ………………………… ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ……………………………………… ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ……………………… ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ……………………………… ‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ …………………………………… ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ………………………… ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ……………………………………… ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫…………………………… ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ………………………………… ‪۵۵‬‬
‫………………………… ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪vsdnhApaS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،v‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫(‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1280 X 720‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :640 X 480‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :320 X 240‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :4000 X 3000‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A1‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3984 X 2656‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ (٣:٢‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3840 X 2160‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3264 X 2448‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A3‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2560 X 1920‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A4‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2048 X 1536‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1920 X 1080‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1024 X 768‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪sdnhApa‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪vsdnhApaS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ژﺳﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻑ ‪ ۶‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ »ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ« ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫● ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺴﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪spa‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪snhApaS‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ) ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ S‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ*‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ*‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠۴‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪nhAp‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪nhAp‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﺎﺯی )‪ (ISO‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ ISO‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬
‫‪vdnhApa‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺩﺭ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪vdnhApa‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵١‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪snhAp‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻣﯽ ﻟﺮﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮏ‬
‫ﺧﻄﯽ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮏ ﺧﻄﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪dnhAp‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ AF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪sdnhApa‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪ :AF‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ :AF‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪sdnhApa‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ(‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫۔ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺳﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫۔ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫۔ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪ ، AF‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (۶٩‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ )ﺗﺎ ﺩﻩ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ »ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ« ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ »ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ«‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪،‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٧‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ژﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ ١٢‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ )ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ FR‬ﺪﻨﻤﺷﻮﻫ ﺶﻳﺍﺮﻳﻭ ‪ My Star‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻡیﻅﻥﺕ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺕﺵگﺯﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻡیﻅﻥﺕ‬
‫ﺕﺵگﺯﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ FR‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪ [f] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٨‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪ [f] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ My Star‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٨‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬
‫‪vdnhAp‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫‪nhAp‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ« )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ EV‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) AEB ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ ACB‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ACB :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ACB :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،a‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ACB‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫‪vdnhAp‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﮐﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﮐﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪vdnhAp‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫)ﺍﺑﺮی(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٠‬‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺯ(‬
‫)ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :H-‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :L-‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ(‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ی‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫‪snhAp‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ‪ ACB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﮑﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪VGA‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )‪ ۶‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ؛ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:AEB‬‬
‫● ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫‪vnhApa‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :-) .‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ :+‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪vnhApa‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ‪1‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺷﯽء ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ ﻗﻮی‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ‪ :2‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ‪ :1‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪nhAp‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ 0 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ(‬
‫● ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫● ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ …………………………………… ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ …………………………………… ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ……………………………………… ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫…………………………………………… ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ………………………………… ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ……………………………… ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ………………………………… ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ……………………………………… ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………… ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫………………………… ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ……………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ………………………… ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪٧٩ ………………………… (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٠ … HDTV‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨٢ ………… (Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪٨٣ ……………… Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨۶ …………… (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Mac‬‬
‫……………… ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪٨٨ ……… (PictBridge‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫● ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ؛ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪AV‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪FLASH‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪suwon-si‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪SIZE‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪DATE‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ My Star‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٩‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ) ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪) .‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﮑﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ← ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪،‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪،‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [m] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﮑﺘﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﻭی ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [o] ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [t] ƾɭ [F‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[M‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ˚‪90‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :-) .‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ :+‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪/‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :-) .‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ :+‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ‪1‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ ،DPOF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [f‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [D‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪DPOF 1.1‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،A/V‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ‪ HDTV‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [P‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ HDTV‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ،HDTV‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﭘﯽ ﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﺭﻡ )‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣/٢ ،Intel Pentium 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٢/۶ ،AMD Athlon™ 64FX‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﻡ )‪(RAM‬‬
‫)‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Windows XP SP2/Vista/7‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫‪ ٢۵٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ DirectX 9.0c ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ /Windows XP/Vista7‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٫۴ Mac OS‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮی ‪ ATI X1600‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ١٠٢۴x٧۶٨‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ‪ ١۶‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫)‪ ١٢٨٠ × ١٠٢۴‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ،USB‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ PC‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﻬﺸﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Run iStudio.exe‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )▲( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Flickr‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ YouTube‬ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ Help Menu ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Install Intelli-studio on PC Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﭙﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪) MP4 :‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪AVI(MJPEG) ،(WMV 7/8/9) WMV ،(AAC :‬‬‫ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪TIFF ،PNG ،BMP ،GIF ،JPG :‬‬‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک )ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Flickr‬ﻳﺎ ‪ YouTube‬ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ PC‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )▲( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ٧/Windows Vista‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ,‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫→ ‪My Computer → Removable Disk → DCIM‬‬
‫‪ 100PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȏ‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Mac‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫۴ Mac OS‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )▲( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪:‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [t‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɔ‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ »ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺎپ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [F‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ………………………………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫…………………………………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ………………………………………………………………… ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ………………………………………………………… ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ……………………………………………………………… ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ………………………………………………… ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………………… ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………………………… ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ……………………………………………… ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ………………………………………………………… ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ …………………………………… ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………………… ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ……………………………………………… ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ȋ‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Ȉ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ȉ‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی‪AF‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ɓ‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۴-٩٢‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی‪AF‬‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ :‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻋﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻮﮔﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۵‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ*‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﺒﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪(+ ،X ،3X3 ،*2X2) .‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 0/5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ*‪ 1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ(‪) .‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‪) .‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ )‪ (DST‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪0001‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮی*‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ 100PHOTO ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ SAM_0001 ،‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ SAM_0001‬ﺗﺎ ‪ SAM_9999‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100PHOTO‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 999PHOTO‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 9999‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ ،(DCF‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :*NTSC‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺰﻳﮏ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪) PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﮋﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭک‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫‪Anynet+‬‬
‫)‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Samsung HDTV‬‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ )‪ Anynet+(CEC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ،HDTV‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺣﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫● ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 1 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ*‪ 5 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ 10 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪/1080i* ،720p ،480p :NTSC‬‬
‫‪(1080i* ،720p ،576p :PAL‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ*‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ١ SD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ (Secure Digital)SD‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ (Secure Digital High Capacity)SDHC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ )ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ SD‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ SDHC‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪١۴٧‬‬
‫‪١۶٧‬‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫‪٣٣٩‬‬
‫‪۵٣٢‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠‬‬
‫‪١,۴٧١‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪۴٠٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨۴‬‬
‫‪۴۴١‬‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫‪۵٢٨‬‬
‫‪٣۶٧‬‬
‫‪۵٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧۴‬‬
‫‪٧٩٢‬‬
‫‪۵۶۶‬‬
‫‪١,٠۶۵ ٨٠٢‬‬
‫‪١,۴٣٧ ١,١۴۴‬‬
‫‪١,٨٧٢ ١,۶٧٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫*ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١۵‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ۶٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‬‫‪ ۴٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ١۴‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‬‫‪ ٢٧‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ٢۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‬‫‪ ٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ۵٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ۵۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ٢٧‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ٢۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ٠۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ۴٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ٠٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ٩۴‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫* ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ ،a‬ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،12M‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪) OIS ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪SLB-11A‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١,١٣٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ ٣/٨‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ )ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ‪ 1280 x 720HQ‬ﻭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ )‪ ۵‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ ۵٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ(‬‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺧﺘﺨﻮﺍﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺘﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺪﺭﺍﻝ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ( ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫● ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪،v ،d‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ s‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٠‬‬
‫● ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠۴‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۶‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫● ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫● ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻭﺍﻳﺪ( ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ‪ intelli-studio‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٣‬‬
‫● ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ PC‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ‪← My Computer ← Start‬‬
‫‪ iStudio.exe ← Intelli-studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ ١/٢/٣ CCD‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١/١٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢/٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۴/٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ١- ١⁄٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ١۶ - ١⁄٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺐ‪ ٨ - ١⁄٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‪ ٢ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ ،Schneider-KREUZNACH‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ=‬
‫‪ ٣/٩ - ۵٨/۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪ ٢۴ - ٣۶٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‪,‬‬
‫‪ ١۵X‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪F-stop‬‬
‫‪)F5.8‬ﺗﻠﻪ( ‪) F3.2 -‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪) ±2EV‬ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪(EV ١⁄٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ١/٠ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵/٠‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ١/٠ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢/۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪٣٢٠٠ ،١۶٠٠ ،٨٠٠ ،۴٠٠ ،٢٠٠ ،١٠٠ ،٨٠ ،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬
‫‪ ٣/٠ AMOLED‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫‪ ۶١۴,۴٠٠ VGA‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪ ،AE‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫● ﻭﺍﻳﺪ‪ ٠/٣ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣/٧‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫● ﺗﻠﻪ‪ ٠/۵ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢/٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪ AF) TTL‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ AF ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪،AF‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ,‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪، AF‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ )‪(T‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪EVC‬‬
‫‪ ١/٢) ±1EV‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﻩ‬
‫‪] DUAL IS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ + (OIS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪[(DIS‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ RGB ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪,‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ,‬ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫● ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ,‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ,‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ,‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ,1‬ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،H-‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،L-‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪) H.264 :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ٢٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ٧٢٠ x ١٢٨٠ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ٧٢٠ x ١٢٨٠ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪٢۴٠ x ٣٢٠ ،۴٨٠ x ۶۴٠‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ 60 :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 30 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 15 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :OIS‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ,EV ,‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‪,‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‪ ,‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی(‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪،DUAL IS ،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ(‪ ,‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺸﻪ‬
‫● ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪AEB ،‬‬
‫● ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 2 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ RGB ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪,‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ,‬ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،ACB :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫● ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ,‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ,‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ,‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ,1‬ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪2‬‬
‫نیبرود تاصخشم‬
‫ضبط صدا‬
‫برای ‪ 1 SD‬گیگابایتی‬
‫● ●ضبط صدا (حداکثر ‪ 10‬ساعت)‬
‫● ●یادداشت صوتی در عکس (حداکثر ‪ 10‬ثانیه)‬
‫● ●ضبط استریو‬
‫ذخیره سازی‬
‫رسانه‬
‫● ●حافظه داخلی‪ :‬تقریباً ‪ 27/9‬مگابایت‬
‫● ●حافظه خارجی (اختیاری)‬
‫ ‪-‬کارت ‪( SD‬تا ‪ 2‬گیگابایت ضمانت می شود)‬‫‪- -‬کارت ‪( SDHC‬تا ‪ 8‬گیگابایت ضمانت می شود)‬
‫اندازه تصویر‬
‫ممکن است ظرفیت حافظه داخلی با این مشخصات مطابقت نداشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫فرمت فایل‬
‫● ●عکس‪،DPOF 1.1 ،EXIF 2.21 ،JPEG (DCF) :‬‬
‫‪PictBridge 1.0‬‬
‫● ●فیلم‪MP4 (H.264 (MPEG-4.AVC)) :‬‬
‫● ●صدا‪WAV :‬‬
‫خیلی خوب‬
‫خوب‬
‫نرمال‬
‫‪4000 x 3000‬‬
‫‪147‬‬
‫‪284‬‬
‫‪403‬‬
‫‪3984 x 2656‬‬
‫‪167‬‬
‫‪313‬‬
‫‪441‬‬
‫‪3840 x 2160‬‬
‫‪202‬‬
‫‪367‬‬
‫‪528‬‬
‫‪3264 x 2448‬‬
‫‪211‬‬
‫‪374‬‬
‫‪537‬‬
‫‪2560 x 1920‬‬
‫‪339‬‬
‫‪566‬‬
‫‪792‬‬
‫‪2048 x 1536‬‬
‫‪532‬‬
‫‪802‬‬
‫‪1065‬‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪870‬‬
‫‪1144‬‬
‫‪1437‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1471‬‬
‫‪1670‬‬
‫‪1872‬‬
‫این ارقام بر اساس شرایط استاندارد ‪ Samsung‬ذکر شده اند و ممکن است ‬
‫بسته به شرایط تصویربرداری و تنظیمات دوربین تغییر کنند‪.‬‬
‫واسط‬
‫رابط خروجی‬
‫دیجیتال‬
‫‪ 20( USB 2.0‬پین)‏‬
‫خروجی صدا‬
‫مونو (بلندگوی داخلی)‪ ،‬استریو (میکروفن)‬
‫خروجی تصویر‬
‫رابط ورودی برق‬
‫مستقیم‬
‫اه تسویپ ‪106‬‬
‫● ●‪( NTSC ،PAL :AV‬قابل انتخاب)‬
‫● ●‪( NTSC ،PAL :HDMI 1.4‬قابل انتخاب)‬
‫‪ 20‬پین‪ 4/4 ،‬ولت‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ١,١٣٠ ،SLB-11A‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪ ٢٨ x ۶٠/۵ x ١٠۶/۶‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢١۴/۶‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪٪ ٨۵ - ۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ‪ Hg، Cd‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Pb‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 2006/66‬ﮐﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ Samsung‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪٩٣ Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫پ‬
‫‪٣۶ GPS‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪٨٠ HDTV‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺁ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨٧ Mac‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٨٢ Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪٧٩ (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫چ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٢٩ DUAL IS‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫‪٧٧ ،۵٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪٧٧ ،۵٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫‪۶٢ AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪٢٩ Dual IS‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪٩١ ،٢١‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪١۴ MENU‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ‪۶‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪٩١ AF‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻅ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪۴٩ ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ک‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫گ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ی‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ‪٩٣ AF‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٢٩،٢۴ (OIS‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺸﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪۵٣ AF‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪۵٣ AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ‪ http://www.samsungimaging.com/‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
Download PDF